Fujitsu ASYE12GACH Installation Manual

Fujitsu ASYE12GACH Installation Manual
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ EEV :‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫‪TM‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ASHE07GACH/ASYE07GACH‬‬
‫‪ASHE09GACH/ASYE09GACH‬‬
‫‪ASHE12GACH/ASYE12GACH‬‬
‫‪ASHE14GACH/ASYE14GACH‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻨﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻬﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ ‪9377773128‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:36 PM‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ً‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ً‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻒ ‪9377773128‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪) VRF‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ EEV :‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰ ًء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻂ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻢ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪1 .............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪1 .............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.2‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪1 ............................................................................R410A‬‬
‫‪ .2.2‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻟـ ‪1 .............................................................................................R410A‬‬
‫‪ .3.2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪2 .................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪2 ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪2 .................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.3‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪2 ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.3‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪3 ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.3‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪3 ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ‪4 ...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.4‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ‪4 ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.4‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ‪5 ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.4‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﻠﻴﺞ )ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ( ‪5 ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪6 .............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪6 ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.5‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ‪7 ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.5‬ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪7 ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ‪8 ...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪8 ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪9 ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪9 ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.6‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ( ‪10 ..............................................................‬‬
‫‪ .5.6‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ‪11 ..........................................................‬‬
‫‪ .6.6‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪12 ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ‪13 ........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ‪13 ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.8‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ‪13 .....................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.8‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪13 .....................................................................‬‬
‫‪.9‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‪13 .................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .10‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪14 ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ( ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻮﺍء ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫‪ .1.2‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪R410A‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌًﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻛﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﺠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺴﻌﺎﺕ ﺻﻘﻴﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2.2‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻟـ ‪R410A‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪ ،R410A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪ R410A‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1.6‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ ،R22‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺰﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ )‪ (R22‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻀﺨﺔ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺯﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﻋﻜﺴﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﻳﺖ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻍ‬
‫ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ -100.7‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ )‪ 5‬ﻃﻦ‪ -755 ،‬ﻣﻢ ﺯﺋﺒﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺴﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (R22‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺧﻠﻂ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻌﺐ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ‪ -0.1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5.3‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ -0.1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3.8‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪ R410A‬ﻣﻦ ‪.HFC‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺨﻮﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻂ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻫﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-1‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:36 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 1‬‬
‫‪ .4.2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .3.2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZC‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫)ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(CNB01 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZB‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫)ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ‪(CNA01 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZD‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫)ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ ‪(CNA02 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZ7‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ‪(CNA03 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZE‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ ‪(CNA04 /‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻣًﺎ ً‬
‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺏ(‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ .1.3‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﻧﻘﻼﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻧﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﺒﺔ‬
‫)‪M4 × 25‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻠﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺒﺮﻳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻴﺎﻑ ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺮﻗﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺒﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﻧﻴﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ (RB‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (7‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫)‪ (8‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﻀﺨﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (9‬ﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ‪A‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Ar-2‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:35 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 2‬‬
‫‪.3.3.3‬‬
‫‪ .2.3‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺷﻖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻥ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﻖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ 80‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ‪.B .Fig‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ 60‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 40‬ﻣﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 90‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ )‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ُﺳﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﻨﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ(‪(B .Fig) .‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﻖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ‪(B .Fig) .‬‬
‫‪ 1,500‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫)ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ(‬
‫‪ 1,800‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪B .Fig‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺻﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 15.8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16.7‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪ 13.8‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 80‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ .3.3‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 80‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﻨﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﻮﻳًﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.1.3.3‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ*‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ*‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ 5‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑـ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻭ‪ 4‬ﻭ‪ 5‬ﻓﻲ )‪.(A .Fig‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﻖ ﺃﺧﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ ،3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﻖ ﺣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪A .Fig‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ(‬
‫*ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪.4.3.3‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ[‬
‫‪.2.3.3‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻻﺻﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 6‬ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﻨﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻮﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺻﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺰﻳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﺒﺔ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ[‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻭﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﻖ ﺃﺧﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺻﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺻﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪Ar-3‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:34 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 3‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻖ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ]▲[‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ )‪ 2‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ( ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ‬
‫)‪ 4‬ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻨﻲ )‪ (R70‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺛﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﺯ(‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺜﻨﻲ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻌﺒﺮﺓ ﺛﻨﻲ ‪ 70‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫● ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻲ )‪ 4‬ﻣﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ( ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫]▲[‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﻋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺻﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺻﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺳﺪﺍﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫]ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ[‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺻﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﺻﺮﻑ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫]ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ[‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ )ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء( ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪ً .R410A‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﺻﺮﻑ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺘﺮﻭﺟﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ ﻋﺒﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫‪ .1.4‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺻﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺻﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.5.3.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﺙ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻧﺤﺎﺱ ﻋﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻧﺤﺎﺱ ﻋﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺤﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﺰﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺴﻔﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺠﻢ‪ 10/‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻧﺤﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻬﺎ )ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ(‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮﻱ ﻟﻼﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻮﺛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ R410A‬ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ )‪ ،(R22‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺳﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ R410A‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ(‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻧﺤﺎﺱ ﺃﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺪﻧﺔ )‪(R410A‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ]ﻣﻢ )ﺑﻮﺻﺔ([‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻛﺔ ]ﻣﻢ[‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫‪1.00‬‬
‫‪1.20‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﺤﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-4‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:34 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 4‬‬
‫‪ .2.3.4‬ﺛﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ .2.4‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺛﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺗﻤﺪﻫﺎ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺛﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 120‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ،70%‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻤﻚ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ‪ 70‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،80%‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ُ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻤﻚ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫‪ 15‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ،80%‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ُ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ُ‬
‫‪ 0.045‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪)/‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻴﻠﻔﻦ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 20‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3.3.4‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪) EV‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪.EV‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻨﻴﻨﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3.4‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﻠﻴﺞ )ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺻﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﺎﻭﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻠﺠﺔ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﺎﻭﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻠﺠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪ .1.3.4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻮﺍﺋﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻠﺠﺔ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻠﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪(RB‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻴﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ .R410A‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻤﺎﻭﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﻠﺠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻕ ﻗﺮﺻﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻔﻠﻴﺞ ]‪ [L‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻖ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ]ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﻮﺻﺔ([‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ‪] A‬ﻣﻢ[‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﻟـ ‪ ،R410A‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺾ‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪0.5‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﻠﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﻠﺠﺔ ]ﻣﻢ )ﺑﻮﺻﺔ([‬
‫‪ (1/4) 6.35‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ (3/8) 9.52‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ (1/2) 12.70‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ (5/8) 15.88‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ (3/4) 19.05‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ]ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ )ﻛﺠﻢ ﻗﻮﺓ·ﺳﻢ([‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 160) 18‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(180‬‬
‫‪ 32‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 320) 42‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(420‬‬
‫‪ 49‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 490) 61‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(610‬‬
‫‪ 63‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 630) 75‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(750‬‬
‫‪ 90‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 900) 110‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(1,100‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪EV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ‬
‫‪] B-0.4‬ﻣﻢ[‬
‫‪9.1‬‬
‫‪13.2‬‬
‫‪16.6‬‬
‫‪19.7‬‬
‫‪24.0‬‬
‫ﻃﻘﻢ ‪ EV‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪E07/09G‬‬
‫‪AS‬‬
‫‪UTR-EV09XB‬‬
‫‪E12/14G‬‬
‫‪AS‬‬
‫‪UTR-EV14XB‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ )‪ (R22‬ﻟﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ‪ ،R410A‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ‪ A‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 0.5‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ )ﻟﻠﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﻠﻴﺞ ‪ (R410A‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ .A‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻴﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫]ﻣﻢ )ﺑﻮﺻﺔ([‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﻄﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻠﺠﺔ‬
‫]ﻣﻢ[‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪Ar-5‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:33 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 5‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .1.5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻮﻯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻛﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻭﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .(RB‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻳﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .A‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫‪MCA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪E07GACH‬‬
‫‪AS‬‬
‫‪ 0.22‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪E09GACH‬‬
‫‪AS‬‬
‫‪ 0.23‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪E12GACH‬‬
‫‪AS‬‬
‫‪ 0.28‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪E14GACH‬‬
‫‪AS‬‬
‫‪ 0.42‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪MFA‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ :MCA‬ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ :MFA‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ MCA‬ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 15‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ MCA‬ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ RB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .B‬ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‬
‫* ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ "ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ "RB‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪ 0.1 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ 44‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ **‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪ 0.1 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫‪ 45‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪148‬‬
‫* ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻀﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪.RB‬‬
‫** ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ،44‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ‪ 30‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.1.5‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ )ﻣﻢ‪(2‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ( ﺑﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ( ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻚ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ .2%‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺑﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ‬
‫‪ 230‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ 198‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 264‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ 50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ 198‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 253‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪2.5‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ IEC57 245‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ( ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ +‬ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ(‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 22‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫‪0.33‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪LONWORKS‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ )‪ (AWG‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪4‬‬
‫)‪ (NEMA‬ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﺒﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺼﻤﺖ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻮﻑ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ‬
‫‪ 0.65‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻧﻮﻉ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ(‬
‫‪ 0.33‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪1.25‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ PVC‬ﻣﻐﻠﻒ*‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻧﻮﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫‪0.33‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ PVC‬ﻣﻐﻠﻒ*‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻄﺎﺏ‬
‫*‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻐﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-6‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:33 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 6‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ .2.5‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺼﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺼﻤﺖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪1* RB‬‬
‫‪ .B‬ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺸﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪*2‬‬
‫‪*3‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫‪*2‬‬
‫‪*2‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺰﻡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (7‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ 2‬ﻛﺒﻠﻲ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪*3‬‬
‫‪*3‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺰﻉ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫ُﻛﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪.RB‬‬
‫*‪ :2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ( ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ )ﺃﺭﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫*‪ :3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Y3‬‬
‫)ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺮﺓ ﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺳﺤﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺳﺤﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ‪M4‬‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪(GND ،N ،L/‬‬
‫‪ .3.5‬ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 1.2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1.8‬ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫)‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 18‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺳﻢ(‬
‫‪ .2.3.5‬ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 40‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ .1.3.5‬ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ 75‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 200‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻐﻠﻒ‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻗﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ‪.C .Fig‬‬
‫‪ 220‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ(‬
‫‪C .Fig‬‬
‫‪ .A‬ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺼﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻃﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺰﻡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ 2‬ﻛﺒﻠﻲ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺰﻉ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1.2‬ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫)‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 12‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺳﻢ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ‪M4‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ‪(X2 ،X1/‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻏﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫‪Ar-7‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:33 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 7‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (3‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ ،AD IU (1‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ................ SW AD REF‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ )‪ .1.6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ .........................‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ SW AD REF ،AD IU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(0‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ...............................‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ SW AD REF ،AD IU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(0‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(IU AD × 1‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(IU AD × 10‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ IU AD SW‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ‪.A Table‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(REF AD × 1‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(REF AD × 10‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ REF AD SW‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ‪ A Table‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ .1.6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪(“0” :‬‬
‫‪IU AD × 10‬‬
‫‪IU AD × 1‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫‪REF AD × 10‬‬
‫‪REF AD × 1‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪(“0” :‬‬
‫‪RC AD × 1‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪A Table‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪63‬‬
‫‪IU AD × 1‬‬
‫‪IU AD × 10‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪99‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫‪REF AD × 10‬‬
‫‪REF AD × 1‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺛﺮﻣﺴﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ‪ 3‬ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ "‪."00‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺛﺮﻣﻴﺴﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ‬
‫)ﺃﺭﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫‪REF AD SW‬‬
‫× ‪10‬‬
‫×‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪IU AD SW‬‬
‫×‪1‬‬
‫× ‪10‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )‪ (IU AD SW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.99‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ (i‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(RC AD SW‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑـ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ RC AD SW‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪.0‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪15‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪RC AD‬‬
‫‪Ar-8‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:32 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 8‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 00‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫○‬
‫‪ 01‬ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ 02‬ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ 00‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪ 00‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫‪ 02‬ﺿﺒﻂ )‪(2‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 00‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ 01‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫○‬
‫○‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 01‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ 00‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫○‬
‫‪ 01‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ‪ SET 3 SW1‬ﻭ‪ SW2‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.B Table‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ 02‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )‪(SET 3‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪SW1‬‬
‫‪SW2‬‬
‫‪SW3‬‬
‫‪SW4‬‬
‫‪SET‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪B Table‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫‪) A‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ(‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪SET 3 SW1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪SET 3 SW2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ .01‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.02‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 6‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ .01‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ .02‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.03‬‬
‫‪ 03‬ﺿﺒﻂ )‪(3‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫○‬
‫‪ 01‬ﺿﺒﻂ )‪(1‬‬
‫‪ 00‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫○‬
‫‪ 01‬ﺿﺒﻂ )‪(1‬‬
‫‪ 00‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ .2.6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 02‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 02‬ﺿﺒﻂ )‪(2‬‬
‫‪ (ii‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(RC AD SW‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺒﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ .01‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪.02‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫○‬
‫‪ 01‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 02‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ 00‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫○‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ 01‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 00‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫○‬
‫‪ 01‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.01‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻃﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻃﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،01‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻙ( ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫○‬
‫○‬
‫○‬
‫‪ .1.3.6‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ .3.6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ .1.6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ" ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ ،EEV‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫*‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻜﺎﺏ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) FILTER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ( )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) TIMER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ()ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) OPERATION‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫‪Ar-9‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:32 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 9‬‬
‫‪ .2.3.6‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ .4.6‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ "‪) "MANUAL AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) OPERATION‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪1.0/‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) TIMER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ()ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ )‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 0.5/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) FILTER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ( )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 0.5/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﺤﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺰﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﺒﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪24 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﺍﻋﺰﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ )ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ‪ 12‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪OPERATION‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪TIMER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ()ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪FILTER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ( )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﺤﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺰﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ )ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪30 :‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ‪ 12‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 1.0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪OPERATION‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪) TIMER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪) FILTER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ(‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫)‪ .(SW1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪ EV‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪63‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ 00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪99‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،0‬ﻭﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ .1.6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ" ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )‪ ،(SW1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )‪(SW1‬‬
‫‪) 2WIRE‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫‪3WIRE‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )‪(SW1‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪2WIRE‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) OPERATION‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ; ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ )‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 0.5/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) TIMER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ()ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ؛ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 0.5/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪) FILTER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ( )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ 0) :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0.5) (9‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 0.5/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ )‪(CNC01‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ )ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،31 :‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪2 :‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ‪ 12‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 11‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪OPERATION‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪) TIMER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪) FILTER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ(‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪3WIRE‬‬
‫‪SW1‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪EV‬‬
‫‪Ar-10‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:31 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 10‬‬
‫● ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ )]‪([CNA04] ،[CNA02‬‬
‫‪ .5.6‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ )]‪،[CNA02‬‬
‫]‪.([CNA04‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫)‪(SET 2‬‬
‫)‪(CNA04‬‬
‫‪SW4‬‬
‫‪SW3‬‬
‫‪SW2‬‬
‫‪SW1‬‬
‫)‪(CNA02‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫*‪c‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬
‫*‪d‬‬
‫*‪c‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪1‬‬
‫*‪c‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪3‬‬
‫‪CNA04‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫)‪(CNB01‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ c‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ d‬ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺣﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(CNA01‬‬
‫)‪(CNA03‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪K4‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺣﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻃﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ CNA02‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﺃﻭ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ" ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ CNA03‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CNA04‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻮﻑ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ .(AWG22‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ ‪ 150‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪K1‬‬
‫‪K2‬‬
‫‪K5‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫*‪ 1‬ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫● ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ )]‪([CNA03] ،[CNA01‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ )]‪،[CNA01‬‬
‫]‪.([CNA03‬‬
‫‪K3‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫‪K6‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫*‪a‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫‪ :K6 - K1‬ﻣﺮﺣﻞ‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫*‪b‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻄﻞ‪.‬‬
‫*‪a‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺰ‬
‫● ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪CNA03‬‬
‫*‪a‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪[SW2 2‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ(‬
‫ﺣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺾ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ"‪.‬‬
‫*‪ 1‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﺾ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬ ًﺪﺍ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪ 2-1‬ﻭ‪.3-1‬‬
‫*‪ a‬ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪ 5 :‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫*‪ b‬ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ]‪ [-‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺰ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺒﺾ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪1‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺾ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ 200‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫* ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ"‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺰ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺒﺾ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-11‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:31 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 11‬‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺰ"[‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﺤﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺰﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺒﺾ"[‬
‫• ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫‪CNB01‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪CNA04‬‬
‫‪CNA03‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﺃﻭ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ" ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫]ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺰ" ﻓﻘﻂ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA03‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA04‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪EV‬‬
‫‪ .6.6‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ (1) 1.6‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (5‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺮﻣﺴﺘﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ )ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻮﻑ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ .(22AWG‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ ‪ 25‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ‪ ±2 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ‪ 0‬ﻓﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ 50 :‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫‪CNB‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ :N ،L‬ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪:X2 ،X1‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ(‬
‫ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ( ﻟﻘﻄﻢ ‪EV‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ(‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ(‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ‪2‬‬
‫‪CNB‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻞ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻴًﺎ(‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪EV‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪2-1‬‬
‫‪CNB01‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪3-1‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ‪4-1‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪ ،EV‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻮﺏ )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪ (EV‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺃﻧﺒﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﻌﺰﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻌﺪ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺻﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-12‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:30 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 12‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﺍﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﻮﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (7‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‪ 3) .‬ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ 6‬ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ 6‬ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ 6‬ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ )‪ 2‬ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻮﻱ )ﻭﺳﻂ(‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ )ﻭﺳﻂ(‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﺎ )‪ 2‬ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ( ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ(‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻋﺰﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (8‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (9‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﻨﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺑﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ‪ A‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ‪ 1/2‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ( ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ‪ A‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺠﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻱ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.8‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻒ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﻲ‬
‫‪ .2.8‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺻﺮﻑ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﻨﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﻭﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﻨﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﻟﻒ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1/3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ‪) OPERATION‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭ‪TIMER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ( ﺑﺒﻂء ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪EV‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ )ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻷﻧﺒﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪ EV‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ )ﻣﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ(؟‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺔ‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻡ ﺻﺮﻑ‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪ EV‬ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ*‬
‫ﺧﺎﺑﻮﺭ*‬
‫ﻣﻌﺠﻮﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ*‬
‫)ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ(‬
‫*ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ؟‬
‫ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ؟‬
‫ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ؟‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺳﻴﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﻣﺆﺭﺿﺔ(؟‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ؟‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪Ar-13‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:29 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 13‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ؟‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ؟‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) UTY-RNKYT / UTY-RNKG / UTY-RNKY‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻴﻞ؟‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ‪EV‬؟‬
‫‪) UTY-RNRG / URY-RNRY‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫‪ .10‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‪) [Next Page‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ( )ﺃﻭ ]‪[previous page‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ( ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺷﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪OPERATION‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪TIMER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪FILTER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ(‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‪) [Error Information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‪) [Status‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(9‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(10‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺳﻌﺔ(‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪(9‬‬
‫)‪(15‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(13‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪RB‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) UTY-RLRG / UTY-RLRY‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0.5 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 0.5 /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ 0.1 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 0.1 /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫) ( ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫‪Ar-14‬‬
‫‪11/30/2015 2:34:27 PM‬‬
‫‪9377773128_IM_AR.indd 14‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement